‫‪GET MORE OUT OF COMPUTING‬‬

‫ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫ﻧﮑﺎت ﮐﻠﯿﺪی در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪:‬‬

‫_ ﻣﺮوری ﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﺎری ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Microsoft ® Word‬‬
‫_ اﺻﻮل اوﻟﯿﻪ اﯾﺠﺎد ﺳﻨﺪ و اﯾﺠﺎد ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ای‬
‫_ ﻣﻬﺎرت ﻻزم ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮدن‪ ،‬وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ و اﻧﺘﺸﺎر اﺳﻨﺎد‬
‫_ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﯿﻮه ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻫﻮش‬
‫_ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺪاول‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎ و ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﮔﺮاﻓﯿﮑﯽ‬
‫_ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ادﻏﺎم ﭘﺴﺘﯽ و ﮐﺎر ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺑﺮ روی ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
 ‫ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪International Computer Driving License‬‬

‫ﻓﻬـﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨـﺪرﺟـﺎت‬
‫‪1‬ـ ﺷﺮوع ﮐﺎر‬
‫‪ (١-١‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ ‪١ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (١-٢‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪١ ........................................................................................................... Microsoft Word‬‬
‫‪ (١-٣‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪٢ ....................................................................................................... Microsoft Word‬‬
‫‪ (١-٤‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪۴ .............................................................................................. Microsoft Word‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪۴ .....................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٢‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۵ .................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٣‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪۶ .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٤‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۶ ..............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٥‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۶ .............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٦‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۶ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٧‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۷ ............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٨‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ‪۷ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٩‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ‪۷ .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (١-٥‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪۷ .........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪۷ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-۲‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪۸ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ‪۱۰ ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٤‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪۱۱ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٥‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪۱۱ .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (١-٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪۱۲ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (١-٧‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ‪۱۲ .................................................................................................................... Microsoft Word‬‬
‫‪2‬ـ اﻋﻤﺎل ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ (٢-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۳ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٢‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ‪۱۳ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٣‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۳ ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٤‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۳ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٥‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪۱۴ ......................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٥-١‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪۱۴ .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٥-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Undo‬ﻭ ‪ Redo‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۴ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٦‬ﻛﭙﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪۱۴ .................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٧‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ‪۱۵ ...............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٧-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۵ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٧-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۶ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٢-٧-٣‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۱۶ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪3‬ـ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی در ‪Microsoft Word‬‬
‫‪ (٣-١‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ ‪۱۷ ................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-١-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪﻱ ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-١-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ ‪۱۷ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪International Computer Driving License‬‬

‫‪ (٣-١-٢-١‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ‪۱۹ ...........................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ (٣-١-٢-٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪۲۰ ........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-١-٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪۲۰ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-١-٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪۲۱ .................................................................................................................. Change Case‬‬
‫‪ (٣-١-٥‬ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪۲۱ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۱ ............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-١‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۲ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-٢‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۲ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۳ ........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-٤‬ﺗﻐییﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎیﺶ ﻫﺮ یﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۲۳ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۴ ..........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-۵-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ‪۲۴ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-۵-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ‪۲۴ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-۶‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪۲۵ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٢-۷‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪۲۶ ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ‪۲۷ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ‪۲۷ ................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ‪۲۷ .............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٣‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ‪۲۸ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٣-١‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪۲۸ .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٣-٢‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪۲۸ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٣-٣‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪۲۸ ..........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٤‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۲۹ .............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٥‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۳۰ ......................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-٦‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪۳۰ ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-۷‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎیﯽ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ یﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۳۱ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٣-٣-۸‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻣیﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۳۱ ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﮑﻞ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ (٤-١‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۳۲ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-١‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ‪۳۲ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-١-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Style‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪۳۳ ...................................................................................................... Format‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪۳۴ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٢-١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪۳۴ ..................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٢-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪۳۴ ................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٣‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ‪۳۵ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٣-١‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ‪۳۵ ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٣-١-١‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ‪۳۵ ............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٣-١-٢‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪۳۵ ........................................................................ Spelling and Grammar‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٣-٢‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ )‪۳۶ ................................................................................................................. (AutoCorrect‬‬
‫‪ (٤-٤‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪۳۷ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٤-۵‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪۳۷ .....................................................................................‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬واژه ﭘﺮدازی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪International Computer Driving License‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ وﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬

‫‪ (٥-١‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪۳۸ ...............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۳۸ ................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١-١‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪۳۸ ............................................................................................................................ (Insert‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١-٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ )‪۳۹ ............................................................................................................. (Draw Table‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٢‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۳۹ ......................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٣‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۰ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٤‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۰ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٥‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٦‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ‪۴۱ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٧‬ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪۴۱ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٨‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ‪۴۱ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-٩‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ .............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١٠‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ .................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١١‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۱ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١٢‬ﻣﺘﻤﺎیﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۴۲ .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-١-١۳‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ Tab‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪۴۲ ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪۴۳ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-١‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۳ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٢‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ClipArt‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۴ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٣‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۵ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٤‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۶ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٥‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۴۷ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪۴۷ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪۴۷ ...............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٢‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪۴۷ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪۴۷ .........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٤‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ‪۴۸ .............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٥‬ﺣﺬﻑ ‪۴۸ .................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٦‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪۴۸ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٧‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪۴۸ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٢-٦-٨‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪۴۸ ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٣‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ‪۴۹ .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٤‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ‪۴۹ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٥-٥‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪۵۲ .....................................................................‬‬
‫‪6‬ـ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮدن‬
‫‪ (٦-١‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺎﭖ ‪۵۴ ....................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٦-٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭼﺎﭖ ‪۵۴ ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ (٦-٣‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪۵۵ ........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫‪ (1-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ای ﺑﺮ واژه ﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ )‪ (Word Processors‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ ١‬ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺠﺰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ Word‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ؛ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ؛ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭ ‪ ....‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪) WYSWYG‬ﺳﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ (What You See Is What You Get‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫» ﻫﺮ آﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎدل ﻧﺘﯿﺠﮥ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﺟﺬﺍﺏ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻓﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻬﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ـ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ‪ :‬ﭘﻨﺘﻴﻮﻡ ‪٢٣٣‬‬
‫ـ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪RAM‬‬
‫ـ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1-2‬اﺟﺮای ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ‪Microsoft Word‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Start‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Programs‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (١‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Office (٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Microsoft Word, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Access, Publisher‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (1-3‬اﺟﺰاء اﺻﻠﯽ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ‪Microsoft Word‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺑﺘﺮﻳﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ‪Word‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪Office Assistant‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻥ )ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ I‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫)‪(Status bar‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ )‪(Insertion Point‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،Word‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ ،Word‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ Word ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Word‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ »ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪ «٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Task Pane‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1) Task Pane‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪ :(Title Bar‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Close‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ( ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪(Alt+F4) .‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Maximize‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ (‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Minimize‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ(‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ )‪ :(Menu Bar‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ )‪ :(ToolBars‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ (Standard‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪﻱ )‪ (Formatting‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫•‬

‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ :(Ruler‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻣﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Ruler‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ )‪ :(Status Bar‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ ،(Page‬ﺑﺨﺶ )‪ ،(Sec‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪ (Ln/Col‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (1-4‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ اﺳﻨﺎد در واژه ﭘﺮداز ‪Microsoft Word‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-1‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ View|Toolbars|Standard‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ :File‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ File‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formating‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Right-to-Left‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+Shift‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Left-to-Right‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ )ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+Shift‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ )ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ( ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Alt+Shift‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ؛ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ )‪ :(Capital‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ‪ :Word Wrap‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Space‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﮐﻠﯿﺪ در ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫‪Home‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫‪End‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪Ctrl+Home‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪Ctrl+End‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪PageUp‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪PageDown‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪Ctrl+PageUp‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪Ctrl+PageDown‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﮐﻠﯿﺪ در ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻬـــــــﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫‪Shift+F5‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )(‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ )€(‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )(‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )‚(‬
‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪ + Ctrl‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Backspace‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪Ctrl+Backspace‬‬
‫‪Ctrl+Delete‬‬
‫‪Ctrl+Enter‬‬
‫‪Shift+J‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-2‬ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(Ctrl+S) .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬

‫‪ ،Save in‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺴﻜﺖ ))‪(3.5 Floppy (A:‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫‪ Save‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ Word document‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ از ذﺧﯿﺮه ﮐﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺮوع ﻣﯽﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺮای ﺑﻬﺒﻮد روﻧﺪ ذﺧﯿﺮهﺳﺎزی در ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻮارد زﯾﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ .doc ،Word‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-3‬ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎری ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ دﯾﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Save‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ‪ Save as‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪F12‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save as‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪File‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-4‬ﺑﺎز ﮐﺮدن ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl+O‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-5‬ﺑﺎز ﮐﺮدن ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Open‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫» ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Ctrl‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫» ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (١‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪Shift‬‬
‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Open‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-6‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﯿﻦ اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎز ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩ )‪.(Alt+Tab‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ ،Window‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-7‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Close‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪(Ctrl+W) File‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺒ ًَﹶ‬
‫ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Yes‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ No‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Cancel‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-8‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎز ﺑﻄﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Close all‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-9‬ذﺧﯿﺮه ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎز ﺑﻄﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save all‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ File‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬
‫‪ (5-1-1‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫)‪ (View‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ٦‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫‪Print Layout‬‬ ‫‪Outline‬‬

‫‪Web Layout‬‬
 ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Normal View‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Web Layout View‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪Print Layout View‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Print Layout‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (Styles‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫‪Outline View‬‬ ‫[‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫‪Document Map‬‬ ‫\‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪Thumbnails‬‬ ‫]‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-2‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ در ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ‪ Word‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Toolbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ :View‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﻠﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪More Buttons‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add or Remove Buttons‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Customize‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫‪ g‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﮕﺎﺭﺷﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪ ،Customize‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Tools|Customize‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻭ ‪ Formating‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Toolbars‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪New‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Toolbars name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Commands‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ )ﻣﻨﻮﻱ( ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )‪ (Categories‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ )‪،(Commands‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪ Word :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Commands‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New Menu‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Categories‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New Menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ )‪ (Commands‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Modify Selection‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Commands‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Customize‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
 ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Menu bar‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Toolbar‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،Add‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Add Commands‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ Commands‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Delete‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬

‫‪ (5-1-3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰار ﺑﺰرگ و ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻠﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪،Zoom‬‬
‫‪ View‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Zoom‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪11‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-4‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ Ctrl+ Ä‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫¶‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺎ ‪ Tab Stop‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺘﻬﺎی وﯾﮋه در واژه ﭘﺮداز‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Tools|Options...‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ File Locations‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ـ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ User Information‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ View‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Formatting mark‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ All‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (1-6‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﮐﺮدن از ﺗﻮاﺑﻊ ﮐﻤﮏ )‪(Help‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Help‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Help‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Help‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Microsoft word Help‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮگ ‪ :Contents‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﺒﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮگ ‪ :Ansewer Wizard‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮگ ‪ : Index‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ؛ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Online Help‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ؟ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ؟ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ Office Assistant .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪) Answer Wizard‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﺪ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Help‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺷﺪﻥ ‪Office‬‬
‫‪ Assistant‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Show the Office Assistant‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (1-7‬ﺧﺮوج از ‪Microsoft Word‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ File|Exit‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪close‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪13‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬

‫‪ (2-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-2‬وارد ﮐﺮدن ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎی وﯾﮋه )ﺳﯿﻤﺒﻮل(‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪Webdings ،Symbol ،AGA Arabesque .‬‬
‫‪ wingdings‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺒﻞﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺒﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Insert|Symbol‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Symbol‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Cancel‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-3‬وارد ﮐﺮدن ﺗﺎرﯾﺦ و زﻣﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Date and Time‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Insert‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Available formats‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-4‬روﺷﻬﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻦ در ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫روﺷﻬﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪Ctrl+Shift +‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪Ctrl+A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫روﺷﻬﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎوس‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫»ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ« )‪ (Drag and Drop‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫‪ (2-5‬وﯾﺮاﯾﺶ داده ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ (2-5-1‬درج و ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Insert‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ OVR‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ( ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Undo‬‬ ‫‪Redo‬‬ ‫‪ (2-5-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰارﻫﺎی ‪ Undo‬و ‪ Redo‬در ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl+Z‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Undo‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ Undo‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Undo‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Redo‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ (Undo‬ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ)‪ .(Ctrl+Y‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-6‬ﮐﭙﯽ‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل و ﺣﺬف‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Edit‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﻛﭙﻲ )‪ : (Copy‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )‪ : (Cut‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ )‪ : (Past‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪15‬‬

‫‪» Ã‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ Cut‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ Copy‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪«.‬‬
‫‪ Ã‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪ Clipboard‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Clipboard‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪ RAM‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ g‬ﺣﺬﻑ )‪ : (Clear‬ﺑﺮای اﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﯿﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را از ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺣﺬف ﮐﻨﯿﻢ از ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Clear‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ )ﺟﻬﺖ راﺣﺘﯽ ﮐﺎر ﻣﯽﺗﻮاﻧﯿﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ Delete‬را از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﭙﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ‬

‫‪Ctrl+V‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+C‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+X‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬

‫‪Edit | Past‬‬ ‫‪Edit | Copy‬‬ ‫‪Edit | Cut‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬

‫‪Past‬‬ ‫‪Copy‬‬ ‫‪Cut‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ (2-7‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ و ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ‬
‫‪ (2-7-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰار ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ در ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫در اﯾﻦ ﮐﺎدر‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ و ﯾﺎ‬

‫ﻋﺒﺎرت ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫را ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﻌﺪی‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ و ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮدن‬

‫ﮐﺎدر ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎت ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬

‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪیﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮارد ﺧﺎص‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Find‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(Ctrl+F) .‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Find what‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ‬
‫‪Mach Case‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫‪Find whole words only‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻟﻐﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Use widcards‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻨﻲ )*‪ (? ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪Sound like (English‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪Find all word forms (English‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Mach kashida‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-7-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﺑﺰار ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻨﯽ در ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Replace‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Ctrl+H‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Find What‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Replace with‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Replace‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Find Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Replace All‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (2-7-3‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﮑﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Find‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Go to‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Go to‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﺒﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl+G‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Next‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ‪ Previous‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ +‬ﻳﺎ – ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Close‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪17‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی در ‪Microsoft Word‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻠﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ word‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻱ )‪ (Character Formatting‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪(Paragraph Formatting‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ )‪ (Document Formatting‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮی‬

‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪» .‬ﻗﻠﻢ«‪» ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ«‪» ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ« ﻭ »ﺳﺒﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ« ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪی )‪(Formatting‬‬

‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ View|Toolbar|Formatting‬ﻧﻮار ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ در ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮐﺎر ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Word‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻮﭘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻂﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫‪ (3-1-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮐﺎدر ﻣﺤﺎوره ای ﻓﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Time New Roman‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ .Arial‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ )‪(Point‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٧٢‬ﭘﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪ Ctrl+D‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ( ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﻮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪Regular :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )]‪(Ctrl+‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺏ‪(Ctrl+I) Italic :‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )[‪(Ctrl+‬‬

‫ﺿﺨﻴﻢ‪(Ctrl+B) Bold :‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )‪(Ctrl+Shift+K‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ )‪(Ctrl+Shift+A‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ )=‪(Ctrl+‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ )=‪(Ctrl+Shift+‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬

‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪ : Latin text Font‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻣﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Font Style‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Regular‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‪) Italic ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺏ(‪) Bold ،‬ﭘﺮﺭﻧﮓ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) BoldItalic‬ﭘﺮﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺏ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :Complex scripts‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ )ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺑﻲ( ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :All text‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪Font‬‬
‫‪ Color‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ Underline Style ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪Underline‬‬
‫‪ Color‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Effects‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪19‬‬

‫‪ : Preview‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫‪Sin2α‬‬ ‫‪Sin + 2(Ctrl+Shift+=)+α‬‬

‫‪Co2‬‬ ‫)=‪Co + 2(Ctrl+‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪: Strikethrough‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Double Strikethrough‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ : Shadow‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Outline‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Emboss‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Engrave‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ )ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Small caps‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :All caps‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ‪ :Hidden‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪ (3-1-2-1‬اﻋﻤﺎل ﺟﻠﻮه ﻫﺎی وﯾﮋه ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎراﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Font‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Text Effect‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ ،Animations‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻜﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-1-2-2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺮوف‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ‬
‫‪ Character Spacing‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Font‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Scale‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Preview‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :Spacing z‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Condensed‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Expanded‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Normal‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Spacing‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Position‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ Raised) .‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻭ ‪ Lowered‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪ : Kerning for Fonts z‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Bold‬ﺿﺨﯿﻢ( را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+B‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Italic‬ﻣﻮرب( را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+I‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪) Underline‬زﯾﺮ ﺧﻂ دار( را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+U‬‬
‫ﮐﺎدر ﻣﺤﺎوره ‪ Font‬را ﺑﺎز ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+D‬‬
‫اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬ ‫>‪Ctrl+Shift+‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ اﻧﺪازه ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‬ ‫<‪Ctrl+Shift+‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﯾﺰ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺼﻮرت ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ اﻓﺰاﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪Ctrl+‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﯾﺰ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﺑﺼﻮرت ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ واﺣﺪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪Ctrl+‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺪﯾﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (Superscript‬ﻗﺮار ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫=‪Ctrl+Shift+‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺪﯾﺲ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ )‪ (Subscript‬ﻗﺮار ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫=‪Ctrl+‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Font‬واﻗﻊ در ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ‪ Formatting‬را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+Shift+F‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Size‬واﻗﻊ در ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ‪ Formatting‬را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ctrl+Shift+P‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪21‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-4‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ‪Change Case‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﮕﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Change Case‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺭﻙ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Change Case‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﭻ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : Sentence case‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : lowercase‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : UPERCASE‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : Title Case‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Title Case‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ : tOGGLE cASE‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-1-5‬ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮدن ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه از ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﺵ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺑﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Format Painter‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ Format Painter‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Format Painter‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-2‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-2-1‬ﺗﺮازﺑﻨﺪی ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Left‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Right‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪ (Center‬ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ )‪ (Justify‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Left‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ ،(Align Right‬ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ )‪ (Center‬ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ )‪ (Justify‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Formatting‬‬
‫‪Ctrl+L‬‬
‫‪Ctrl+E‬‬

‫‪Ctrl+J‬‬
‫‪Ctrl+R‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪Alignment‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-2‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎی ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Line Spacing‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Single‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ(‬
‫• ‪ : 1.5 lines‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ‪ ١/٥‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Double‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : At least‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Exactly‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫• ‪ : Multiple‬ﻣﻀﺎﺭﺏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ At‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪TAB‬‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪23‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-3‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Spacing‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ ،Paragraph‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Befor‬ﻭ ‪ After‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-4‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ دادن روش ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ از ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ Word ،‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺮﻡ )‪ (Soft Page Breaks‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ) ‪Manual Page‬‬
‫‪ (Breaks‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Page Break‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Widow‬ﻭ ‪ Orphan‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،Widow‬ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ‪Orphan‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Widow‬ﻭ ‪ Orphan‬ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،Word‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Paragraph‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ ،Paragraph‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Line and Page Breaks‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Widow‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Widow / Orphan control‬‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Orphan‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Keep lines together‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪Keep with next‬‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Page break befor‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪Suppress line numbers‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪Don’t hyphenate‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-2-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﭘﺎراﮔﺮاف ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ (3-2-5-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺧﻂ ﮐﺶ ﺑﺮای ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪Print Layout‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Print Layout‬ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‹ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫‹ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ )ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ(‬ ‫‹ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻣﻌﻠﻖ(‬
‫‹ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ )ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬

‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪Decrease Indent‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪Increase Indent‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+M‬ﻭ ‪ Ctrl+Shift+M‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ ١/٢٧‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‬

‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪ (3-2-5-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮐﺎدر ﻣﺤﺎوره ‪ Paragraph‬ﺑﺮای ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮرﻓﺘﮕﯽ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Paragraph‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Before Text‬ﻭ ‪) After Text‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ( ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ( ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ First line‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Hanging‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪ Special‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ By‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪25‬‬

‫‪ (3-2-6‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﺷﻤﺎره دار و ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دار‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ )‪ :(In linelist‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬ ‫‪Family‬‬ ‫‪Paste‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ )‪ :(Bulleted list‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬ ‫•‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Family‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Paste‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Time‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ :(Numbered list‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬ـ ‪Name‬‬
‫‪2‬ـ ‪Family‬‬
‫‪3‬ـ ‪Paste‬‬
‫‪4‬ـ ‪Time‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Bullets and Numbering‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭ )‪ :(Bullet‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Bullets and Numbering‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ Bullets‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ Bullets and Numbering‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Bulleted‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Numbered‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Outline Numbered‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Customize...‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ None‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-2-7‬ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ اﻧﻮاع ﮐﺎدرﻫﺎ و ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Borders and shading‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Borders‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Page Border‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ :Shading‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Borders‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Style‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Color‬ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Width‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Preview‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Page Border‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻡ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺝ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Shading‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Fill‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Style‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Color‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪27‬‬

‫‪ (3-3‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی اﺳﻨﺎد‬

‫‪ (3-3-1‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ ١/٢٥‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Margins‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Margins‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺷﻴﺮﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﺮﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪ (3-3-2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ اﻧﺪازه و ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Margins‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮع ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Orientation‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Portrait‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ »ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ« ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Landscape‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ »ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ« ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Paper Size‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ ،Paper‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ )ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ( ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Custom Size‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ‪ Width‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Height‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻏﺪ ‪ 21-29.7cm ،A4‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-3-3‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺴﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ( ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﻄﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3-1‬درج ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪا ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪Break‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Section break types‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫‪) Section‬ﺑﺨﺶ( ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Next page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Continiuous‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Even page‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Odd page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ )ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ )ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ( ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪،(Ctrl+Enter=Page break‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ )‪ (Column break‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (Text wrapping break‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3-2‬ﺣﺬف ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪا ﮐﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Delete‬ﻳﺎ ‪ BackSpace‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-3-3‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ‪ Apply to‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪29‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ This Section‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‪ This point forward ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ‪ Whole Document‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-4‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ و ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Header‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Footer‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Page Layout‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Header and Footer‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ‪ Header‬ﻭ ‪) Footer‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Header‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪) Header and Footer‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪Page Setup‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Header‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺨﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Switch between Header and Footer‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Header and‬‬
‫‪ Footer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Header and Footer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫_ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Layout‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫_ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Layout‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (3-3-5‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Header and Footer‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert Page Number‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺮﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Page Number‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Page Numbers‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Position‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ Buttom of Page (Footer‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ ،Top of Page (Header‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ Right ،Left‬ﻭ ‪ Center‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺻﺤﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪) Inside‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﻴﺮﺍﺯﻩ( ﻳﺎ ‪) Outside‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫_ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Show number of first page‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ Format‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-6‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﭘﺎورﻗﯽ و ﯾﺎداﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ )‪ (Footnote‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (Endnote‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Insert |Refreance|Footnote‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪31‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Location‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (Footnote‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ )‪ (Endnote‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Numbring‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Restrat each page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ Continues‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺠﺰ ‪ ١‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Start at‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Ctrl+Alt+F‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺸﺎﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ )ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Conver‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (3-3-7‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ اﺻﻮل ﻧﺤﻮۀ ﺷﻤﺎرش ﻋﺒﺎرات ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ‪Space‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ‪Space‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Word Count‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Word Count‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word Count‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Show Toolbar‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3-3-8‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺮای ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ Word‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Background‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Background‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﮑﻞ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ (4-1‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺮدن ﯾﮏ ﺷﯿﻮه ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Style‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Formatting‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫‪ Ctrl+Shift+S‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ (.‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Format|Styles and Formatting‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ Style‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Styles and Formatting‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪ : (Heading‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ‪ Heading1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ Heading2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ )‪ : (Normal‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ : (Footer and Header‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ )‪ : (Footnote Text‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ g‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ : (Page Number‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-1‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮار اﺑﺰار ‪ Formatting‬ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﯿﻮه‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪،Formatting‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Style list‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ـ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪33‬‬

‫‪ (4-1-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﺳﺘﻮر ‪ Style‬در ﻣﻨﻮی ‪Format‬‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Word‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Format|Style‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ Style‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Style‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪New Style‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Name‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺒﻜﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،Format‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Font‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Paragraph‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Tab‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Border‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Frame‬ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ :Numbering‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Add Template‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ Automatically update‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ‪ Normal‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Style‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻮﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Shortcut Key‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪Format‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ New Style‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪Press New‬‬
‫‪ Shortcut‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،Assign‬ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Close‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-2‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﯾﮏ اﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮای اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎرﺑﺮد‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ )‪ (Template‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )‪ Document Template (Dot‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ ً ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ‪ Normal‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-2-1‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﯾﮏ اﻟﮕﻮی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ File|New‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ New Document‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ New‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،Standard‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ Normal‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ New Document‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ On my computer‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫& ‪Letter‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ‪) General‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ( ـ‬
‫‪) Faxes‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻫﺎ( ـ ‪) Memos‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ( ﻭ ‪) Other Documents‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ( ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ‪ Blank Document‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ General‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Create New‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Template‬‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Save as‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Windows|Application data|Microsoft|Templates‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ General‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-2-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪35‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ Document‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Create New‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ‪ Doc‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-3‬ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ اﺻﻮل ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﯿﺮ اﻣﻼﯾﯽ و ﮔﺮاﻣﺮی‬

‫‪ (4-3-1‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﻣﻼ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻣﻼﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر‬ ‫•‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺟﺮای دﺳﺘﻮر ‪Spelling and Grammar‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪ (4-3-1-1‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Tools|Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Spelling & Grammar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Check spelling as you type‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Add‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-3-1-2‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮل اﻣﻼﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺟﺮای دﺳﺘﻮر ‪Spelling and Grammar‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Spelling & Grammar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ F7‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Spelling & Grammar‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬

‫‪ (4-3-2‬ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر )‪(AutoCorrect‬‬

‫‪ Autocorect‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺛﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ AutoCorrect‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ AutoCorrect‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ WORD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Caps Lock‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻫــﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳــﭗ ﻋﻤــﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨــﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﻃــﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﺎﺏ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Repelace‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ With‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Add‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Repelace‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ With‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺠﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Tab ،Enter‬ﻭ ‪ Spacebar‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪37‬‬

‫‪ (4-4‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮدﮐﺎر )‪(Autotext‬‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ ،Word‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ!(‬
‫ﭘﺮﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﻭﺯﻣﺮﻩ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ AutoText‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ AutoCorrect‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Add‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ AutoText‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ ،AutoText‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ AutoText‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ AutoText‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (4-5‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﯿﻮﻧﺪ در ﻣﮑﺎن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪(Document1.doc‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Copy‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬ـ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻼ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪(Document2.doc‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ(‬

‫)ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪٦‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past Special‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪٧‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ As‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past Link‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ ٥‬ـ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬

‫‪ (5-1‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪاول‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ (Column :‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﺳﻄﺮ‪ (Row :‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ )‪ (Cell‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٥‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-1‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﺪول‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(Insert Table‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(Draw Table‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-1-1‬درج ﺟﺪول )‪(Insert‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Table ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ )‪ (Rows‬ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (Columns‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ word‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ AutoFormat...‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪39‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Insert Table‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،Standard‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Insert Table‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ (5-1-1-2‬ﺑﻪ روش ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ )‪(Draw Table‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Draw Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Borders‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Draw Table‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Borders‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺄﻭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﺔ ) ‪ ( I‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Borders‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ‬

‫‪ (5-1-2‬ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ در ﺟﺪول‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻭ ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Shift+Tab‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﻢ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﻢ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-3‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﺟﺰای ﺟﺪول‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد‬ ‫روش ﻫﺎی اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Select|Rows‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ )ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Select|Coulmn‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Select‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Cells‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺳﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Table|Select|Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-4‬درج ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮن ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ای از ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪول‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪41‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-5‬ﺣﺬف ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮن ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ای از ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪول ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ Table|Delete‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Table‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Columns‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rows‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Cells‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-6‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Split Cells‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Split Cells‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ Table‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ‪ Split Cells‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪Number of columns‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Number of rows‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Merage cells befor split‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ (5-1-7‬ادﻏﺎم ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ در ﯾﮏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ اﺻﻠﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Merge Cells‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Merge Cells‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-8‬ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪول ﺑﻪ دو ﺟﺪول ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Split Table‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﻄﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Split Table‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪ .(Ctrl+Shift+Enter‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-9‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ در ﺟﺪول ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪،‬‬
‫‪Format|Text‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ Direction‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-10‬اﺻﻮل ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺟﺪول‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Table AutoFormat‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Table Style‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-11‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺧﻄﻮط و ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪول‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Border and Shading‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Format‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Table and Border‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-1-12‬ﻣﺘﻤﺎﯾﺰ ﮐﺮدن ﺳﻄﺮ اول ﺟﺪول‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Heading‬‬
‫‪ Rows Repeat‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Table‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫‪ (5-1-13‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ‪ Tab‬در اﯾﺠﺎد ﺟﺪاول‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ Tab .‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﻨﮕﺎﺗﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ١/٢٧‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪) Right Tab‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ L‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣ ﹰﺎ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Decimal ،Center ،Right ،Left‬ﻭ ‪ Bar‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Format|Tab‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ‪Tab‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Right Tab‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﻤﺘﺮﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻱ )ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻱ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪Decimal Tab‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪Bar Tab‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﭗ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪Left Tab‬‬

‫ﮊﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﻂ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪Center Tab‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪43‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ‪ Tab‬ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ Tab‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Tabs‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Tabs‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.(.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﻬﺶ ‪ Tab‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Default tab stops‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Tab Stop Position‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Tab‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ ،Alignment‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Set‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Leader‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ ،Tab‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Clear‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Tab‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪Tab‬‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ Tab‬ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ‪ Tab‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ Tab‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫‪ (5-2‬ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ‪ ،‬اﺷﮑﺎل اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ (5-2-1‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮔﺮاﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ‪ Inser|Picture|From File‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Copy‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Past‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-2‬درج ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ‪ ClipArt‬در ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ ،ClipArt‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،ClipArt .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ ،ClipArt‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫‪١‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻠﻜﺴﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ClipArt‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ ،Insert‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪،Picture‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Clip Art‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ‪ ClipArt‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٤‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Picture‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Picture‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻦ ‪View|Toolbar|Picture‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ(‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ( ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬

‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪45‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-3‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﺷﮑﻠﻬﺎی اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ view‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Toolbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Drawing‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻀﻲ )‪(Oval‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ )‪(Arrow‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ )‪(WordArt‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫)‪(Line‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ )ﻣﺮﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬

‫)‪(Rectangle‬‬ ‫)‪(Text Box‬‬

‫‪ É‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ +‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Autoshapes‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ )‪(Canvas‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Drawing‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ AutoShapes‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﺶ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Ctrl ،Shift‬ﻭ ‪ Alt‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ :Shift‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ )ﻣﺎﻳﻞ( ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ :Ctrl‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺣﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ :Alt‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻼ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-4‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﻧﻤﻮدار ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺬﺍﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ ،Word‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Insert|Picture|Chart‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ‪ West ،East‬ﻭ ‪ North‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ‪ 1st Qtr‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﺓ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Chart Type‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Chart Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Legand‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Titles‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪47‬‬

‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ 3D View‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ É‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Object‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Object‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Create New‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Object Type‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Microsot Graph 2000 Chart‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-5‬اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮده ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Excel‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ‪ Word‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫)‪ (Insert Microsoft Excel Worksheet‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Excel‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6‬اﻋﻤﺎل وﯾﮋه ﺑﺮ روی ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ‪ ،‬اﺷﮑﺎل اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﻧﻤﻮدارﻫﺎ در ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺎری و ﺑﯿﻦ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎی ﺑﺎز ﻓﻌﺎل‬
‫‪ (5-2-6-1‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Select Object‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-2‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ رﻧﮓ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﭘﺲ زﻣﯿﻨﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Line Color‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Fill Color‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺧﻂ( ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-3‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ اﻧﺪازه ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﮒ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-4‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﺮ )‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﮒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-5‬ﺣﺬف ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Del‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Clear‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ Edit‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-6‬ﺗﺮاز ﮐﺮدن ﻣﺘﻦ و ﺗﺼﺎوﯾﺮ ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Format Picture‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Layout‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Picture‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Text Wrapping‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ‬

‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-7‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن و ﻗﺮﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﺎزی‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Drawing‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Free Rotate‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Draw|Rotate or Flip‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ Drawing‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-2-6-8‬اﻓﺰودن ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ اﺷﮑﺎل ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪Add‬‬
‫‪ Text‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Edit Text‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪49‬‬

‫‪ (5-3‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﺳﺘﻮﻧﯽ‬

‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Word‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ )‪ (Column Break‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Column‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Column‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Foramt‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Columns‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Right-to-‬‬
‫‪ Left‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Line between‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Number of columns‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Width‬ﻭ ‪ Spacing‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Equal‬‬
‫‪ Column Width‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Insert‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Column‬‬
‫‪ Break‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪.(Ctrl+Shift+Enter‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Continuous‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Break‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-4‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﯾﺠﺎد ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ )ادﻏﺎم ﭘﺴﺘﯽ( ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﻬﺎی داده ای ﺑﺮای اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﯾﮏ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ )ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ( ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ )ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ )ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ( ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Tabric‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪Field name‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺴﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ .٣‬ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اول‪ :‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺳﻨﺪ اﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪Mail‬‬
‫‪ Merge Helper‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Create‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ From Letters ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪New Main Document‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ دوم‪ :‬اﯾﺠﺎد ﻣﻨﺒﻊ داده ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Data Source‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Get Data‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Create Data Source‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Create Data Source‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Field names in header row‬ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﻧﺎﻡ« ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪ Field name‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Add Field Name‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Field names in‬‬
‫‪ header‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻣﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪Field names in header‬‬
‫‪Remove Field‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫‪ Name‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪ Ok‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪Creat Data‬‬
‫‪ ،Source‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Save as‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻼ ‪.(Test-1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪51‬‬

‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Edit Data Source‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪ Data Form‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Add New‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ View Source‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻛﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ‪ (Test-2‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Save‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ )ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Merge to New Document‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ n‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮم‪ :‬آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزی ﺳﻨﺪ اﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Insert‬‬
‫‪ Merge Field‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ View Merged Data‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (5-5‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ New‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Create‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Envelopes‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Active Windows‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Get Data‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Open‬‬
‫‪ Data Source‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ Open Data Source‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫)‪ (Test-1‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Set Up Main Document‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪Envelope‬‬
‫‪ Options‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ ،Envelop Options‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Font‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪) Dellivery address‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ( ﻭ‬
‫‪) Return address‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪53‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Printing Options‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ‪Sample‬‬
‫‪ envelope address‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Mail Merge Helper‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Close‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Merge to New Document‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Mail Merge‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Envelopes1‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪ ٦‬ـ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪ (6-1‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Word‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪File|Print Preview‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Print Layout View‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Print Preview‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪Standard‬‬
‫)ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ‪ Ctrl+F2‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Print Preview‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺫﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Word‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Magnifer‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Print Preview‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﺎﭖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫‪ (6-2‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی اﺻﻠﯽ ﭼﺎپ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ‪ Ctrl+P‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﭼﺎﭖ‬

‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭖ ﺷﻮﺩ؟‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﭼﺎﭖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬
‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬ ‫‪55‬‬

‫‪ (6-3‬آﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ اﺻﻮل ﭼﺎپ ﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ All‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Page range‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Current Page‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Page range‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Selection‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ،Page range‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Ok‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Print‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﺔ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Odd‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ‪ Even‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Pages‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ Page range‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ )‪ (-‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (,‬ﭼﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ 10-20‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪10,20‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺮ روی ﭘﺎﮐﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Envelope and Labels‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Envelopes‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Perview‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒ ‪ Labels‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻲ ‪ Envelope and Labels‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft  Word‬‬ ‫واژهﭘﺮدازﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﻣﻬﺎرت ﺳﻮم ‪ /‬ﺗﺪوﯾﻦ ‪ :‬ﺳﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺮدی‬

‫‪٢‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Address‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Full Page of the same lable‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Single lable‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ـ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ﭘﻴﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺗﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ .Office 2000‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﺸﻴﻦ ﻳﻮﺭﺩﺷﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪١٣٧٩ .SAMS‬‬
‫‪٢‬ـ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ‪ Word‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ .٢٠٠٢‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﻮﺱ‪١٣٨٣ .‬‬
‫‪٣‬ـ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻓﻴﺲ ‪ .XP‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﺒﺎﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪١٣٨١ .‬‬
‫‪٤‬ـ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ICDL‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ .٢‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺷﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﭘﺎﺳﺎﺭﮔﺎﺩ‪١٣٨٢ .‬‬
‫‪٥‬ـ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ .Word XP ٢‬ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻱ؛ ﻣﺠﻴﺪ ﺳﺒﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﮔﻞ؛ ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﻗﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺎﺭ‪١٣٨٣ .‬‬
‫‪٦‬ـ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ‪ .Word 2002‬ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺴﻮﻥ ﺁﺫﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻫﻨﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﺒﺎﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪١٣٨٣ .‬‬
‫‪7- ECDL module 3, Reference manual Word Processing (Microsoft Word 2000 or XP), Edition for‬‬
‫‪ECDL Syllabus. http://www.cheltenhamcourseware.com‬‬